Linux kernel mirror (for testing)
git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
kernel
os
linux
1/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2/*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2021 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
16#include <linux/bug.h>
17#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21#include <net/cfg80211.h>
22#include <net/codel.h>
23#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24#include <asm/unaligned.h>
25
26/**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35/**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47 */
48
49/**
50 * DOC: Warning
51 *
52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56/**
57 * DOC: Frame format
58 *
59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71 */
72
73/**
74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
88/**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
117 *
118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122 * .release_buffered_frames().
123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126 */
127
128struct device;
129
130/**
131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132 *
133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135 */
136enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139};
140
141#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
142
143/**
144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149 */
150enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
155};
156
157/**
158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159 *
160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162 *
163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172 */
173struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 u16 txop;
175 u16 cw_min;
176 u16 cw_max;
177 u8 aifs;
178 bool acm;
179 bool uapsd;
180 bool mu_edca;
181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182};
183
184struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189};
190
191/**
192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199 */
200enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
206};
207
208/**
209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210 *
211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213 *
214 * @def: the channel definition
215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224 */
225struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228
229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230
231 bool radar_enabled;
232
233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234};
235
236/**
237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248 * for changes/removal.)
249 */
250enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253};
254
255/**
256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257 *
258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261 * done.
262 *
263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266 */
267struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271};
272
273/**
274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275 *
276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278 *
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280 * also implies a change in the AID.
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304 * changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309 * context had been assigned.
310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313 * keep alive) changed.
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
322 * status changed.
323 *
324 */
325enum ieee80211_bss_change {
326 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
327 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
330 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
331 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
333 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
336 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
337 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
338 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
339 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
340 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
341 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
342 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
343 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
344 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
345 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
346 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
347 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
348 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
349 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
350 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
351 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
352 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
353 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
354 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
356 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
357 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
358
359 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
360};
361
362/*
363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
365 * filtering will be disabled.
366 */
367#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
368
369/**
370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
375 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
376 * once each time the timeout triggers.
377 */
378enum ieee80211_event_type {
379 RSSI_EVENT,
380 MLME_EVENT,
381 BAR_RX_EVENT,
382 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
383};
384
385/**
386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
389 */
390enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
391 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
392 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
393};
394
395/**
396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
398 */
399struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
400 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
401};
402
403/**
404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
409 */
410enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
411 AUTH_EVENT,
412 ASSOC_EVENT,
413 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
414 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
415};
416
417/**
418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
422 */
423enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
424 MLME_SUCCESS,
425 MLME_DENIED,
426 MLME_TIMEOUT,
427};
428
429/**
430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
434 */
435struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
436 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
438 u16 reason;
439};
440
441/**
442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
444 * @tid: the tid
445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
446 */
447struct ieee80211_ba_event {
448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
449 u16 tid;
450 u16 ssn;
451};
452
453/**
454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
459 * @u:union holding the fields above
460 */
461struct ieee80211_event {
462 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
463 union {
464 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
465 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
466 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
467 } u;
468};
469
470/**
471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
472 *
473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
474 *
475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
477 */
478struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
479 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
480 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
481};
482
483/**
484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
485 *
486 * @lci: LCI subelement content
487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
488 * @lci_len: LCI data length
489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
490 */
491struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
492 const u8 *lci;
493 const u8 *civicloc;
494 size_t lci_len;
495 size_t civicloc_len;
496};
497
498/**
499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
501 *
502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504 */
505struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
506 u32 min_interval;
507 u32 max_interval;
508};
509
510/**
511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512 *
513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515 *
516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
520 * ACK, BACK or both
521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
525 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
529 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
530 * @assoc: association status
531 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
532 * or not
533 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
534 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
535 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
536 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
537 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
538 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
539 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
540 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
541 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
542 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
543 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
544 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
545 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
546 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
547 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
548 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
549 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
550 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
551 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
552 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
553 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
554 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
555 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
556 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
557 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
558 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
559 * the current band.
560 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
561 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
562 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
563 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
564 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
565 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
566 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
567 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
568 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
569 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
570 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
571 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
572 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
573 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
574 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
575 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
576 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
577 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
578 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
579 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
580 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
581 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
582 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
583 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
584 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
585 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
586 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
587 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
588 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
589 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
590 * your driver/device needs to do.
591 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
592 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
593 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
594 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
595 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
596 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
597 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
598 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
599 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
600 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
601 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
602 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
603 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
604 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
605 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
606 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
607 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
608 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
609 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
610 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
611 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
612 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
613 * station.
614 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
615 * responder functionality.
616 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
617 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
618 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
619 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
620 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
621 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
622 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
623 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
624 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
625 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
626 * connected to (STA)
627 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
628 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
629 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
630 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
631 * interval.
632 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
633 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
634 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
635 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
636 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
637 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
638 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
639 */
640struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
641 const u8 *bssid;
642 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
643 bool uora_exists;
644 u8 uora_ocw_range;
645 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
646 bool he_support;
647 bool twt_requester;
648 bool twt_responder;
649 bool twt_protected;
650 bool twt_broadcast;
651 /* association related data */
652 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
653 bool ibss_creator;
654 u16 aid;
655 /* erp related data */
656 bool use_cts_prot;
657 bool use_short_preamble;
658 bool use_short_slot;
659 bool enable_beacon;
660 u8 dtim_period;
661 u16 beacon_int;
662 u16 assoc_capability;
663 u64 sync_tsf;
664 u32 sync_device_ts;
665 u8 sync_dtim_count;
666 u32 basic_rates;
667 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
668 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
669 u16 ht_operation_mode;
670 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
671 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
672 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
673 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
674 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
675 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
676 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
677 int arp_addr_cnt;
678 bool qos;
679 bool idle;
680 bool ps;
681 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
682 size_t ssid_len;
683 bool hidden_ssid;
684 int txpower;
685 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
686 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
687 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
688 u16 max_idle_period;
689 bool protected_keep_alive;
690 bool ftm_responder;
691 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
692 /* Multiple BSSID data */
693 bool nontransmitted;
694 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
695 u8 bssid_index;
696 u8 bssid_indicator;
697 bool ema_ap;
698 u8 profile_periodicity;
699 struct {
700 u32 params;
701 u16 nss_set;
702 } he_oper;
703 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
704 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
705 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
706 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
707 bool s1g;
708 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
709 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
710 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
711 u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
712 u8 pwr_reduction;
713};
714
715/**
716 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
717 *
718 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
719 *
720 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
722 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
723 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
724 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
725 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
726 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
727 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
728 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
729 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
730 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
731 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
734 * station
735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
738 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
740 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
741 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
742 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
743 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
744 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
745 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
746 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
747 * hardware queue.
748 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
749 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
750 * is for the whole aggregation.
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
752 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
754 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
755 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
757 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
758 * off-channel operation.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
760 * (header conversion)
761 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
762 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
764 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
765 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
766 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
767 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
768 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
769 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
770 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
771 * queue gets full.
772 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
773 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
774 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
775 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
776 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
777 * should kick the MLME state machine.
778 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
779 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
780 * status to user space)
781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
782 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
783 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
785 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
786 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
787 * handled properly by the device.
788 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
789 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
790 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
791 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
792 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
793 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
794 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
795 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
796 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
797 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
798 * PS-Poll responses.
799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
800 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
801 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
802 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
803 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
804 * monitor injection).
805 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
806 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
807 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
808 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
809 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
810 *
811 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
812 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
813 */
814enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
815 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
816 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
817 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
818 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
819 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
820 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
821 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
822 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
823 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
824 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
825 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
826 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
827 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
828 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
829 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
830 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
831 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
834 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
835 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
836 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
838 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
839 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
840 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
841 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
842 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
843 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
844 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
845 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
846};
847
848#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
849
850#define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
851
852/**
853 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
854 *
855 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
856 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
857 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
858 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
859 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
861 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
862 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
863 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
864 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
865 * it can be sent out.
866 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
867 * has already been assigned to this frame.
868 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
869 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
870 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
871 *
872 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
873 */
874enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
875 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
876 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
877 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
878 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
879 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
880 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
881 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
882 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
883 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8),
884};
885
886/*
887 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
888 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
889 */
890#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
891 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
892 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
893 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
894 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
895 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
896 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
897 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
898
899/**
900 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
901 * Rate Control algorithm.
902 *
903 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
904 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
905 *
906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
907 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
908 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
909 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
910 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
911 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
912 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
913 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
914 * Greenfield mode.
915 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
916 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
917 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
918 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
919 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
920 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
921 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
922 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
923 */
924enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
925 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
926 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
927 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
928
929 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
930 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
931 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
932 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
933 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
934 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
935 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
936 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
937 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
938};
939
940
941/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
942#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
943
944/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
945#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
946
947/* maximum number of rate stages */
948#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
949
950/* maximum number of rate table entries */
951#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
952
953/**
954 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
955 *
956 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
957 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
958 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
959 *
960 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
961 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
962 *
963 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
964 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
965 *
966 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
967 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
968 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
969 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
970 * information::
971 *
972 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
973 *
974 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
975 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
976 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
977 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
978 * information should then contain::
979 *
980 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
981 *
982 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
983 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
984 */
985struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
986 s8 idx;
987 u16 count:5,
988 flags:11;
989} __packed;
990
991#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
992
993static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
994 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
995{
996 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
997 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
998 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
999}
1000
1001static inline u8
1002ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1003{
1004 return rate->idx & 0xF;
1005}
1006
1007static inline u8
1008ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1009{
1010 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1011}
1012
1013/**
1014 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1015 *
1016 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1017 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1018 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1019 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1020 *
1021 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1022 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1023 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1024 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1025 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1026 * @control: union part for control data
1027 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1028 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1029 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1030 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1031 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1032 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1033 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1034 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1035 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1036 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1037 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1038 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1039 * @pad: padding
1040 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1041 * @status: union part for status data
1042 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1043 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1044 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1045 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1046 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1047 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1048 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1049 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1050 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1051 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1052 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1053 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1054 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1055 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1056 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1057 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1058 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1059 */
1060struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1061 /* common information */
1062 u32 flags;
1063 u32 band:3,
1064 ack_frame_id:13,
1065 hw_queue:4,
1066 tx_time_est:10;
1067 /* 2 free bits */
1068
1069 union {
1070 struct {
1071 union {
1072 /* rate control */
1073 struct {
1074 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1075 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1076 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1077 u8 use_rts:1;
1078 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1079 u8 short_preamble:1;
1080 u8 skip_table:1;
1081 /* 2 bytes free */
1082 };
1083 /* only needed before rate control */
1084 unsigned long jiffies;
1085 };
1086 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1087 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1088 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1089 u32 flags;
1090 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1091 } control;
1092 struct {
1093 u64 cookie;
1094 } ack;
1095 struct {
1096 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1097 s32 ack_signal;
1098 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1099 u8 ampdu_len;
1100 u8 antenna;
1101 u16 tx_time;
1102 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1103 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1104 } status;
1105 struct {
1106 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1107 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1108 u8 pad[4];
1109
1110 void *rate_driver_data[
1111 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1112 };
1113 void *driver_data[
1114 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1115 };
1116};
1117
1118static inline u16
1119ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1120{
1121 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1122 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1123 */
1124 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1125 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1126}
1127
1128static inline u16
1129ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1130{
1131 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1132}
1133
1134/**
1135 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1136 *
1137 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1138 * @info: Basic tx status information
1139 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1140 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1141 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1142 */
1143struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1144 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1145 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1146 struct sk_buff *skb;
1147 struct rate_info *rate;
1148 struct list_head *free_list;
1149};
1150
1151/**
1152 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1153 *
1154 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1155 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1156 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1157 *
1158 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1159 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1160 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1161 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1162 */
1163struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1164 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1165 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1166 const u8 *common_ies;
1167 size_t common_ie_len;
1168};
1169
1170
1171static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1172{
1173 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1174}
1175
1176static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1177{
1178 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1179}
1180
1181/**
1182 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1183 *
1184 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1185 *
1186 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1187 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1188 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1189 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1190 *
1191 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1192 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1193 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1194 */
1195static inline void
1196ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1197{
1198 int i;
1199
1200 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1201 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1202 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1203 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1204 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1205 /* clear the rate counts */
1206 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1207 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1208 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1209}
1210
1211
1212/**
1213 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1214 *
1215 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1216 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1217 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1218 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1219 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1220 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1221 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1222 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1223 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1224 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1225 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1226 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1227 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1228 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1229 * de-duplication by itself.
1230 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1231 * the frame.
1232 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1233 * the frame.
1234 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1235 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1236 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1237 * merging.
1238 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1239 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1240 * (including FCS) was received.
1241 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1242 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1243 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1244 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1245 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1246 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1247 * each A-MPDU
1248 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1249 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1250 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1251 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1252 * on this subframe
1253 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1254 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1255 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1256 * done by the hardware
1257 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1258 * processing it in any regular way.
1259 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1260 * them for sniffing purposes.
1261 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1262 * monitor interfaces.
1263 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1264 * them for sniffing purposes.
1265 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1266 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1267 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1268 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1269 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1270 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1271 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1272 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1273 * interleaved with other frames.
1274 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1275 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1276 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1277 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1278 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1279 * the first subframe.
1280 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1281 * be done in the hardware.
1282 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1283 * frame
1284 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1285 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1286 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1287 *
1288 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1289 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1290 * - DATA3_CODING
1291 * - DATA5_GI
1292 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1293 * - DATA6_NSTS
1294 * - DATA3_STBC
1295 *
1296 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1297 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1298 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1299 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1300 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1301 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1302 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1303 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1304 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1305 * hardware or driver)
1306 */
1307enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1308 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1309 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1310 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1311 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1312 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1313 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1314 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1315 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1316 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1317 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1318 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1319 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1320 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1321 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1322 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1323 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1324 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1325 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1326 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1327 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1328 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1329 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1330 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1331 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1332 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1333 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1334 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1335 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1336 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1337 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1338 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30),
1339};
1340
1341/**
1342 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1343 *
1344 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1345 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1346 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1347 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1348 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1349 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1350 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1351 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1352 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1353 */
1354enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1355 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1356 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1357 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1358 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1359 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1360 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1361};
1362
1363#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1364
1365enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1366 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1367 RX_ENC_HT,
1368 RX_ENC_VHT,
1369 RX_ENC_HE,
1370};
1371
1372/**
1373 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1374 *
1375 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1376 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1377 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1378 *
1379 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1380 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1381 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1382 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1383 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1384 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1385 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1386 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1387 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1388 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1389 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1390 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1391 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1392 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1393 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1394 * values were filled.
1395 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1396 * support dB or unspecified units)
1397 * @antenna: antenna used
1398 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1399 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1400 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1401 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1402 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1403 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1404 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1405 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1406 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1407 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1408 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1409 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1410 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1411 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1412 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1413 */
1414struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1415 u64 mactime;
1416 u64 boottime_ns;
1417 u32 device_timestamp;
1418 u32 ampdu_reference;
1419 u32 flag;
1420 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1421 u8 enc_flags;
1422 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1423 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1424 u8 rate_idx;
1425 u8 nss;
1426 u8 rx_flags;
1427 u8 band;
1428 u8 antenna;
1429 s8 signal;
1430 u8 chains;
1431 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1432 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1433 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1434};
1435
1436static inline u32
1437ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1438{
1439 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1440 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1441}
1442
1443/**
1444 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1445 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1446 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1447 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1448 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1449 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1450 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1451 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1452 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1453 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1454 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1455 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1456 * @data field.
1457 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1458 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1459 * length
1460 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1461 *
1462 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1463 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1464 * data.
1465 */
1466struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1467 u32 present;
1468 u8 align;
1469 u8 oui[3];
1470 u8 subns;
1471 u8 pad;
1472 u16 len;
1473 u8 data[];
1474} __packed;
1475
1476/**
1477 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1478 *
1479 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1480 *
1481 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1482 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1483 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1484 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1485 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1486 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1487 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1488 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1489 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1490 * for more.
1491 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1492 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1493 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1494 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1495 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1496 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1497 * operating channel.
1498 */
1499enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1500 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1501 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1502 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1503 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1504};
1505
1506
1507/**
1508 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1509 *
1510 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1511 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1512 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1513 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1514 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1515 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1516 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1517 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1518 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1519 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1520 */
1521enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1522 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1523 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1524 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1525 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1526 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1527 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1528 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1529 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1530};
1531
1532/**
1533 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1534 *
1535 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1536 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1537 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1538 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1539 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1540 */
1541enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1542 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1543 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1544 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1545 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1546
1547 /* keep last */
1548 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1549};
1550
1551/**
1552 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1553 *
1554 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1555 *
1556 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1557 *
1558 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1559 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1560 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1561 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1562 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1563 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1564 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1565 *
1566 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1567 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1568 *
1569 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1570 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1571 *
1572 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1573 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1574 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1575 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1576 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1577 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1578 *
1579 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1580 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1581 * configured for an HT channel.
1582 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1583 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1584 */
1585struct ieee80211_conf {
1586 u32 flags;
1587 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1588
1589 u16 listen_interval;
1590 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1591
1592 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1593
1594 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1595 bool radar_enabled;
1596 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1597};
1598
1599/**
1600 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1601 *
1602 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1603 * operation.
1604 *
1605 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1606 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1607 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1608 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1609 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1610 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1611 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1612 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1613 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1614 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1615 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1616 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1617 * channel, expressed in TU.
1618 */
1619struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1620 u64 timestamp;
1621 u32 device_timestamp;
1622 bool block_tx;
1623 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1624 u8 count;
1625 u32 delay;
1626};
1627
1628/**
1629 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1630 *
1631 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1632 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1633 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1634 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1635 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1636 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1637 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1638 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1639 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1640 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1641 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1642 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1643 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1644 */
1645enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1646 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1647 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1648 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1649 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1650};
1651
1652
1653/**
1654 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1655 *
1656 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1657 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1658 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1659 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1660 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1661 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1662 * mac80211.
1663 */
1664
1665enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1666 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1667 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1668 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2),
1669};
1670
1671/**
1672 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1673 *
1674 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1675 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1676 *
1677 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1678 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1679 * or the BSS we're associated to
1680 * @addr: address of this interface
1681 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1682 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1683 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1684 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1685 * for read access.
1686 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1687 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1688 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1689 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1690 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1691 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1692 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1693 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1694 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1695 * restrictions.
1696 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1697 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1698 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1699 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1700 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1701 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1702 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1703 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1704 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1705 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1706 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1707 * interface.
1708 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1709 * for this interface.
1710 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1711 * sizeof(void \*).
1712 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1713 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1714 * protected by fq->lock.
1715 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1716 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1717 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
1718 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1719 * for read access.
1720 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
1721 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1722 */
1723struct ieee80211_vif {
1724 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1725 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1726 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1727 bool p2p;
1728 bool csa_active;
1729 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1730
1731 u8 cab_queue;
1732 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1733
1734 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1735
1736 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1737
1738 u32 driver_flags;
1739 u32 offload_flags;
1740
1741#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1742 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1743#endif
1744
1745 bool probe_req_reg;
1746 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1747
1748 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1749
1750 bool color_change_active;
1751 u8 color_change_color;
1752
1753 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1754
1755 /* must be last */
1756 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1757};
1758
1759static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1760{
1761#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1762 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1763#endif
1764 return false;
1765}
1766
1767/**
1768 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1769 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1770 *
1771 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1772 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1773 *
1774 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1775 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1776 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1777 */
1778struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1779
1780/**
1781 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1782 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1783 *
1784 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1785 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1786 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1787 */
1788struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1789
1790/**
1791 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1792 *
1793 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1794 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1795 *
1796 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1797 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1798 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1799 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1800 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1801 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1802 * generation in software.
1803 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1804 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1805 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1806 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1807 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1808 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1809 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1810 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1811 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1812 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1813 * MIC.
1814 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1815 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1816 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1817 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1818 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1819 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1820 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1821 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1822 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1823 * only for management frames (MFP).
1824 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1825 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1826 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1827 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1828 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1829 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1830 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1831 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1832 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1833 * generation only
1834 */
1835enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1836 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1837 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1838 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1839 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1840 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1841 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1842 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1843 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1844 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1845 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1846 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1847};
1848
1849/**
1850 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1851 *
1852 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1853 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1854 *
1855 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1856 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1857 * encrypted in hardware.
1858 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1859 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1860 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1861 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1862 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1863 * @keylen: key material length
1864 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1865 * data block:
1866 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1867 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1868 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1869 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1870 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1871 */
1872struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1873 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1874 u32 cipher;
1875 u8 icv_len;
1876 u8 iv_len;
1877 u8 hw_key_idx;
1878 s8 keyidx;
1879 u16 flags;
1880 u8 keylen;
1881 u8 key[];
1882};
1883
1884#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1885
1886#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1887#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1888
1889/**
1890 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1891 *
1892 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1893 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1894 * reverse order than in packet)
1895 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1896 * reverse order than in packet)
1897 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1898 * reverse order than in packet)
1899 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1900 * reverse order than in packet)
1901 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1902 */
1903struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1904 union {
1905 struct {
1906 u32 iv32;
1907 u16 iv16;
1908 } tkip;
1909 struct {
1910 u8 pn[6];
1911 } ccmp;
1912 struct {
1913 u8 pn[6];
1914 } aes_cmac;
1915 struct {
1916 u8 pn[6];
1917 } aes_gmac;
1918 struct {
1919 u8 pn[6];
1920 } gcmp;
1921 struct {
1922 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1923 u8 seq_len;
1924 } hw;
1925 };
1926};
1927
1928/**
1929 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1930 *
1931 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1932 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1933 *
1934 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1935 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1936 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1937 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1938 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1939 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1940 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1941 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1942 * key_idx value calculation:
1943 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1944 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1945 */
1946struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1947 u32 cipher;
1948 u16 iftype;
1949 u8 hdr_len;
1950 u8 pn_len;
1951 u8 pn_off;
1952 u8 key_idx_off;
1953 u8 key_idx_mask;
1954 u8 key_idx_shift;
1955 u8 mic_len;
1956};
1957
1958/**
1959 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1960 *
1961 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1962 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1963 *
1964 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1965 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1966 */
1967enum set_key_cmd {
1968 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1969};
1970
1971/**
1972 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1973 *
1974 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1975 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1976 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1977 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1978 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1979 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1980 */
1981enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1982 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1983 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1984 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1985 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1986 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1987 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1988};
1989
1990/**
1991 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1992 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1993 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1994 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1995 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1996 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1997 *
1998 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1999 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
2000 */
2001enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2002 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2003 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2004 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2005 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2006};
2007
2008/**
2009 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2010 *
2011 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2012 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2013 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2014 */
2015struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2016 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2017 struct {
2018 s8 idx;
2019 u8 count;
2020 u8 count_cts;
2021 u8 count_rts;
2022 u16 flags;
2023 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2024};
2025
2026/**
2027 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2028 *
2029 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2030 *
2031 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2032 * to the STA.
2033 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2034 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2035 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2036 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2037 * per peer TPC.
2038 */
2039struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2040 s16 power;
2041 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2042};
2043
2044/**
2045 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2046 *
2047 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2048 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2049 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2050 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2051 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2052 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2053 *
2054 * @addr: MAC address
2055 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2056 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2057 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2058 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2059 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2060 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2061 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2062 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2063 * Can be modified by driver.
2064 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2065 * otherwise always false)
2066 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2067 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2068 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2069 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2070 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2071 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2072 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2073 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2074 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2075 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2076 * the station moves to associated state.
2077 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2078 * @rates: rate control selection table
2079 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2080 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2081 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2082 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2083 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2084 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2085 * unlimited.
2086 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2087 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2088 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2089 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2090 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2091 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2092 */
2093struct ieee80211_sta {
2094 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2095 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2096 u16 aid;
2097 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2098 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2099 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2100 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2101 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2102 bool wme;
2103 u8 uapsd_queues;
2104 u8 max_sp;
2105 u8 rx_nss;
2106 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2107 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2108 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2109 bool tdls;
2110 bool tdls_initiator;
2111 bool mfp;
2112 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2113
2114 /**
2115 * @max_amsdu_len:
2116 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2117 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2118 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2119 *
2120 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2121 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2122 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2123 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2124 *
2125 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2126 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2127 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2128 */
2129 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2130 bool support_p2p_ps;
2131 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2132 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2133 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2134
2135 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2136
2137 /* must be last */
2138 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2139};
2140
2141/**
2142 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2143 *
2144 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2145 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2146 *
2147 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2148 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2149 */
2150enum sta_notify_cmd {
2151 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2152};
2153
2154/**
2155 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2156 *
2157 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2158 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2159 */
2160struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2161 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2162};
2163
2164/**
2165 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2166 *
2167 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2168 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2169 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2170 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2171 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2172 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2173 *
2174 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2175 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2176 */
2177struct ieee80211_txq {
2178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2179 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2180 u8 tid;
2181 u8 ac;
2182
2183 /* must be last */
2184 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2185};
2186
2187/**
2188 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2189 *
2190 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2191 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2192 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2193 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2194 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2195 *
2196 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2197 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2198 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2199 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2200 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2201 * algorithm.
2202 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2203 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2204 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2205 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2206 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2207 * CCK frames.
2208 *
2209 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2210 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2211 * the FCS at the end.
2212 *
2213 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2214 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2215 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2216 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2217 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2218 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2219 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2220 *
2221 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2222 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2223 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2224 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2225 *
2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2227 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2228 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2229 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2230 *
2231 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2232 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2233 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2234 *
2235 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2236 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2237 *
2238 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2239 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2240 *
2241 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2242 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2243 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2244 *
2245 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2246 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2247 *
2248 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2249 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2250 *
2251 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2252 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2253 * the stack.
2254 *
2255 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2256 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2257 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2258 *
2259 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2260 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2261 * dtim_period).
2262 *
2263 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2264 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2265 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2266 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2267 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2268 * only in that case.
2269 *
2270 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2271 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2272 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2273 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2274 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2275 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2276 *
2277 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2278 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2279 * software.
2280 *
2281 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2282 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2283 * active interfaces.
2284 *
2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2286 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2287 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2290 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2291 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2292 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2293 * supported cipher suites.
2294 *
2295 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2296 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2297 * for frames.
2298 *
2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2300 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2301 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2302 * control for more details.
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2305 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2306 *
2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2308 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2309 * is supported.
2310 *
2311 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2312 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2313 *
2314 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2315 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2316 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2317 *
2318 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2319 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2320 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2321 * CSA frame.
2322 *
2323 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2324 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2325 *
2326 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2327 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2328 *
2329 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2330 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2331 *
2332 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2333 * within A-MPDU.
2334 *
2335 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2336 * for sent beacons.
2337 *
2338 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2339 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2340 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2341 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2342 *
2343 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2344 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2345 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2346 * timeout.
2347 *
2348 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2349 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2350 *
2351 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2352 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2353 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2354 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2355 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2356 *
2357 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2358 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2359 *
2360 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2361 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2362 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2363 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2364 *
2365 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2366 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2367 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2368 *
2369 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2370 * TDLS links.
2371 *
2372 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2373 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2374 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2375 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2376 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2377 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2378 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2379 *
2380 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2381 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2382 *
2383 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2384 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2385 *
2386 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2387 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2388 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2389 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2390 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2391 *
2392 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2393 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2394 * TXQs to start with.
2395 *
2396 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2397 * length in tx status information
2398 *
2399 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2400 *
2401 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2402 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2403 *
2404 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2405 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2406 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2407 *
2408 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2409 * offload
2410 *
2411 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2412 * offload
2413 *
2414 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2415 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2416 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2417 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2418 * the stack.
2419 *
2420 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2421 */
2422enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2423 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2424 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2425 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2426 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2427 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2428 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2429 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2430 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2431 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2432 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2433 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2434 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2435 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2436 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2437 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2438 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2439 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2440 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2441 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2442 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2443 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2444 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2445 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2446 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2447 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2448 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2449 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2450 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2451 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2452 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2453 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2454 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2455 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2456 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2457 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2458 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2459 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2460 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2461 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2462 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2463 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2464 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2465 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2466 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2467 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2468 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2469 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2470 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2471 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2472 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2473 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2474 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2475
2476 /* keep last, obviously */
2477 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2478};
2479
2480/**
2481 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2482 *
2483 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2484 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2485 *
2486 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2487 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2488 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2489 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2490 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2491 *
2492 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2493 *
2494 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2495 * along with this structure.
2496 *
2497 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2498 *
2499 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2500 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2501 *
2502 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2503 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2504 *
2505 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2506 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2507 *
2508 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2509 * that HW supports
2510 *
2511 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2512 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2513 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2514 *
2515 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2516 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2517 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2518 *
2519 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2520 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2521 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2522 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2523 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2524 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2525 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2526 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2527 *
2528 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2529 * can handle.
2530 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2531 * the hw can report back.
2532 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2533 *
2534 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2535 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2536 * aggregation.
2537 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2538 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2539 * it shouldn't be set.
2540 *
2541 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2542 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2543 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2544 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2545 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2546 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2547 *
2548 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2549 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2550 *
2551 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2552 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2553 *
2554 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2555 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2556 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2557 * adding _BW is supported today.
2558 *
2559 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2560 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2561 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2562 *
2563 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2564 *
2565 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2566 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2567 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2568 * device_timestamp.
2569 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2570 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2571 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2572 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2573 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2574 *
2575 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2576 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2577 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2578 *
2579 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2580 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2581 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2582 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2583 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2584 * neither enabled.
2585 *
2586 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2587 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2588 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2589 *
2590 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2591 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2592 * supported by HW.
2593 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2594 * device.
2595 *
2596 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2597 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2598 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2599 *
2600 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2601 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2602 *
2603 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2604 */
2605struct ieee80211_hw {
2606 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2607 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2608 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2609 void *priv;
2610 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2611 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2612 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2613 int vif_data_size;
2614 int sta_data_size;
2615 int chanctx_data_size;
2616 int txq_data_size;
2617 u16 queues;
2618 u16 max_listen_interval;
2619 s8 max_signal;
2620 u8 max_rates;
2621 u8 max_report_rates;
2622 u8 max_rate_tries;
2623 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2624 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2625 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2626 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2627 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2628 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2629 struct {
2630 int units_pos;
2631 s16 accuracy;
2632 } radiotap_timestamp;
2633 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2634 u8 uapsd_queues;
2635 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2636 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2637 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2638 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2639 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2640 u8 weight_multiplier;
2641 u32 max_mtu;
2642};
2643
2644static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2645 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2646{
2647 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2648}
2649#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2650
2651static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2652 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2653{
2654 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2655}
2656#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2657
2658/**
2659 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2660 *
2661 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2662 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2663 */
2664struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2665 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2666
2667 /* Keep last */
2668 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2669};
2670
2671/**
2672 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2673 *
2674 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2675 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2676 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2677 * @status: channel-switch response status
2678 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2679 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2680 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2681 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2682 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2683 */
2684struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2685 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2686 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2687 u8 action_code;
2688 u32 status;
2689 u32 timestamp;
2690 u16 switch_time;
2691 u16 switch_timeout;
2692 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2693 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2694};
2695
2696/**
2697 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2698 *
2699 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2700 *
2701 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2702 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2703 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2704 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2705 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2706 *
2707 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2708 */
2709struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2710
2711/**
2712 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2713 *
2714 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2715 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2716 */
2717static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2718{
2719 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2720}
2721
2722/**
2723 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2724 *
2725 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2726 * @addr: the address to set
2727 */
2728static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2729{
2730 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2731}
2732
2733static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2734ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2735 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2736{
2737 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2738 return NULL;
2739 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2740}
2741
2742static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2743ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2744 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2745{
2746 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2747 return NULL;
2748 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2749}
2750
2751static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2752ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2753 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2754{
2755 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2756 return NULL;
2757 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2758}
2759
2760/**
2761 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2762 * @hw: the hardware
2763 * @skb: the skb
2764 *
2765 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2766 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2767 */
2768void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2769
2770/**
2771 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2772 *
2773 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2774 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2775 *
2776 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2777 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2778 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2779 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2780 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2781 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2782 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2783 *
2784 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2785 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2786 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2787 *
2788 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2789 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2790 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2791 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2792 *
2793 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2794 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2795 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2796 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2797 *
2798 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2799 *
2800 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2801 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2802 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2803 * based on the receive flags.
2804 *
2805 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2806 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2807 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2808 * keys.
2809 *
2810 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2811 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2812 * handler.
2813 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2814 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2815 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2816 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2817 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2818 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2819 *
2820 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2821 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2822 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2823 *
2824 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2825 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2826 * requirements:
2827 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
2828 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
2829 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2830 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2831 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2832 encrypted with the new key when also needing
2833 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
2834 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2835 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2836 */
2837
2838/**
2839 * DOC: Powersave support
2840 *
2841 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2842 *
2843 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2844 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2845 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2846 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2847 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2848 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2849 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2850 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2851 *
2852 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2853 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2854 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2855 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2856 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2857 *
2858 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2859 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2860 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2861 *
2862 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2863 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2864 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2865 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2866 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2867 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2868 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2869 *
2870 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2871 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2872 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2873 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2874 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2875 * periods.
2876 *
2877 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2878 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2879 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2880 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2881 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2882 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2883 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2884 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2885 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2886 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2887 *
2888 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2889 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2890 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2891 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2892 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2893 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2894 *
2895 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2896 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2897 */
2898
2899/**
2900 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2901 *
2902 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2903 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2904 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2905 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2906 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2907 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2908 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2909 *
2910 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2911 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2912 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2913 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2914 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2915 *
2916 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2917 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2918 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2919 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2920 *
2921 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2922 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2923 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2924 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2925 *
2926 * - a list of information element IDs
2927 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2928 *
2929 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2930 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2931 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2932 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2933 * vendor information elements.
2934 *
2935 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2936 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2937 *
2938 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2939 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2940 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2941 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2942 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2943 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2944 *
2945 *
2946 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2947 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2948 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2949 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2950 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2951 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2952 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2953 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2954 *
2955 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2956 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2957 * signal strength threshold checking.
2958 */
2959
2960/**
2961 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2962 *
2963 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2964 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2965 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2966 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2967 *
2968 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2969 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2970 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2971 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2972 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2973 * hardware flags.
2974 *
2975 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2976 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2977 * turned off otherwise.
2978 *
2979 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2980 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2981 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2982 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2983 */
2984
2985/**
2986 * DOC: Frame filtering
2987 *
2988 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2989 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2990 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2991 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2992 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2993 *
2994 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2995 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2996 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2997 *
2998 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2999 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3000 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3001 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3002 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3003 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3004 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3005 *
3006 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3007 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3008 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3009 * or dropped.
3010 *
3011 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3012 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3013 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3014 * the flag, but not clear it.
3015 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3016 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3017 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3018 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3019 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3020 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3021 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3022 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3023 */
3024
3025/**
3026 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3027 *
3028 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3029 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3030 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3031 *
3032 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3033 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3034 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3035 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3036 * the driver code.
3037 *
3038 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3039 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3040 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3041 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3042 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3043 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3044 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3045 *
3046 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3047 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3048 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3049 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3050 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3051 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3052 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3053 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3054 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3055 * @sta_notify callback.
3056 *
3057 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3058 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3059 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3060 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3061 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3062 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3063 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3064 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3065 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3066 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3067 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3068 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3069 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3070 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3071 *
3072 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3073 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3074 *
3075 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3076 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3077 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3078 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3079 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3080 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3081 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3082 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3083 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3084 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3085 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3086 *
3087 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3088 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3089 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3090 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3091 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3092 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3093 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3094 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3095 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3096 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3097 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3098 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3099 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3100 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3101 *
3102 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3103 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3104 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3105 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3106 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3107 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3108 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3109 *
3110 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3111 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3112 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3113 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3114 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3115 *
3116 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3117 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3118 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3119 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3120 */
3121
3122/**
3123 * DOC: HW queue control
3124 *
3125 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3126 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3127 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3128 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3129 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3130 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3131 *
3132 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3133 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3134 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3135 *
3136 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3137 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3138 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3139 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3140 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3141 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3142 * the hardware queue.
3143 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3144 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3145 *
3146 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3147 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3148 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3149 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3150 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3151 *
3152 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3153 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3154 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3155 * off-channel queue: 9
3156 *
3157 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3158 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3159 *
3160 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3161 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3162 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3163 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3164 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3165 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3166 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3167 *
3168 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3169 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3170 *
3171 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3172 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3173 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3174 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3175 */
3176
3177/**
3178 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3179 *
3180 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3181 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3182 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3183 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3184 *
3185 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3186 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3187 * multicast address.
3188 *
3189 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3190 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3191 *
3192 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3193 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3194 *
3195 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3196 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3197 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3198 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3199 * honour this flag if possible.
3200 *
3201 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3202 * station
3203 *
3204 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3205 *
3206 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3207 *
3208 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3209 *
3210 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3211 */
3212enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3213 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3214 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3215 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3216 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3217 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3218 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3219 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3220 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3221 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3222};
3223
3224/**
3225 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3226 *
3227 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3228 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3229 *
3230 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3231 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3232 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3233 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3234 *
3235 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3236 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3237 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3238 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3239 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3240 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3241 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3242 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3243 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3244 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3245 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3246 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3247 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3248 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3249 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3250 * session is gone and removes the station.
3251 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3252 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3253 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3254 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3255 */
3256enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3257 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3258 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3259 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3260 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3261 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3262 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3263 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3264};
3265
3266#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3267#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3268
3269/**
3270 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3271 *
3272 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3273 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3274 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3275 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3276 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3277 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3278 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3279 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3280 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3281 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3282 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3283 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3284 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3285 */
3286struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3287 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3288 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3289 u16 tid;
3290 u16 ssn;
3291 u16 buf_size;
3292 bool amsdu;
3293 u16 timeout;
3294};
3295
3296/**
3297 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3298 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3299 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3300 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3301 */
3302enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3303 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3304 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3305};
3306
3307/**
3308 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3309 *
3310 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3311 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3312 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3313 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3314 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3315 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3316 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3317 * the peer.
3318 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3319 * by the peer
3320 */
3321enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3322 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3323 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3324 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3325 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3326};
3327
3328/**
3329 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3330 *
3331 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3332 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3333 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3334 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3335 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3336 *
3337 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3338 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3339 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3340 */
3341enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3342 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3343 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3344};
3345
3346/**
3347 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3348 *
3349 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3350 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3351 *
3352 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3353 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3354 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3355 * of wowlan configuration)
3356 */
3357enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3358 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3359 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3360};
3361
3362/**
3363 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3364 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3365 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3366 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3367 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3368 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3369 * valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3370 */
3371struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3372 u16 duration;
3373 u16 subtype;
3374 u8 success:1;
3375};
3376
3377/**
3378 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3379 *
3380 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3381 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3382 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3383 *
3384 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3385 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3386 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3387 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3388 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3389 * Must be atomic.
3390 *
3391 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3392 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3393 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3394 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3395 * or zero.
3396 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3397 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3398 * is added.
3399 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3400 *
3401 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3402 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3403 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3404 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3405 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3406 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3407 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3408 *
3409 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3410 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3411 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3412 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3413 * reconfigured at resume time.
3414 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3415 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3416 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3417 * must return 1 from this function.
3418 *
3419 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3420 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3421 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3422 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3423 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3424 *
3425 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3426 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3427 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3428 * in suspend().
3429 *
3430 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3431 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3432 * and @stop must be implemented.
3433 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3434 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3435 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3436 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3437 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3438 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3439 *
3440 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3441 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3442 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3443 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3444 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3445 *
3446 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3447 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3448 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3449 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3450 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3451 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3452 * MAC address of the device going away.
3453 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3454 *
3455 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3456 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3457 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3458 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3459 *
3460 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3461 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3462 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3463 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3464 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3465 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3466 * can sleep.
3467 *
3468 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3469 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3470 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3471 *
3472 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3473 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3474 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3475 *
3476 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3477 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3478 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3479 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3480 * which flags are changed.
3481 * This callback can sleep.
3482 *
3483 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3484 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3485 *
3486 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3487 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3488 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3489 * is enabled.
3490 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3491 * The callback can sleep.
3492 *
3493 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3494 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3495 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3496 * The callback must be atomic.
3497 *
3498 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3499 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3500 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3501 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3502 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3503 *
3504 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3505 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3506 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3507 *
3508 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3509 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3510 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3511 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3512 * that power save is disabled.
3513 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3514 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3515 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3516 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3517 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3518 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3519 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3520 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3521 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3522 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3523 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3524 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3525 * The callback can sleep.
3526 *
3527 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3528 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3529 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3530 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3531 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3532 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3533 * The callback can sleep.
3534 *
3535 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3536 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3537 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3538 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3539 *
3540 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3541 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3542 *
3543 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3544 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3545 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3546 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3547 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3548 *
3549 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3550 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3551 * this notification.
3552 * The callback can sleep.
3553 *
3554 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3555 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3556 * The callback can sleep.
3557 *
3558 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3559 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3560 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3561 * The callback must be atomic.
3562 *
3563 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3564 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3565 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3566 * should be set as well.
3567 * The callback can sleep.
3568 *
3569 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3570 * The callback can sleep.
3571 *
3572 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3573 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3574 *
3575 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3576 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3577 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3578 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3579 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3580 * This callback can sleep.
3581 *
3582 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3583 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3584 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3585 * callback can sleep.
3586 *
3587 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3588 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3589 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3590 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3591 *
3592 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3593 * power for the station.
3594 * This callback can sleep.
3595 *
3596 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3597 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3598 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3599 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3600 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3601 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3602 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3603 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3604 * The callback can sleep.
3605 *
3606 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3607 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3608 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3609 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3610 * in @sta_state.
3611 * The callback can sleep.
3612 *
3613 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3614 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3615 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3616 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3617 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3618 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3619 * Must be atomic.
3620 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3621 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3622 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3623 *
3624 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3625 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3626 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3627 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3628 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3629 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3630 * The callback can sleep.
3631 *
3632 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3633 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3634 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3635 * The callback can sleep.
3636 *
3637 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3638 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3639 * required function.
3640 * The callback can sleep.
3641 *
3642 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3643 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3644 * required function.
3645 * The callback can sleep.
3646 *
3647 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3648 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3649 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3650 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3651 * The callback can sleep.
3652 *
3653 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3654 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3655 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3656 * TSF synchronization.
3657 * The callback can sleep.
3658 *
3659 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3660 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3661 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3662 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3663 * The callback can sleep.
3664 *
3665 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3666 *
3667 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3668 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3669 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3670 * The callback can sleep.
3671 *
3672 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3673 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3674 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3675 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3676 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3677 *
3678 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3679 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3680 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3681 *
3682 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3683 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3684 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3685 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3686 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3687 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3688 * The callback can sleep.
3689 *
3690 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3691 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3692 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3693 * completion of the channel switch.
3694 *
3695 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3696 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3697 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3698 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3699 *
3700 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3701 *
3702 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3703 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3704 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3705 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3706 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3707 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3708 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3709 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3710 * must be accepted in this case.
3711 * This callback may sleep.
3712 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3713 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3714 *
3715 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3716 *
3717 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3718 *
3719 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3720 * queues before entering power save.
3721 *
3722 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3723 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3724 * The callback can sleep.
3725 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3726 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3727 * The callback must be atomic.
3728 *
3729 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3730 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3731 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3732 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3733 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3734 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3735 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3736 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3737 * more-data bit must always be set.
3738 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3739 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3740 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3741 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3742 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3743 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3744 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3745 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3746 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3747 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3748 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3749 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3750 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3751 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3752 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3753 * This callback must be atomic.
3754 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3755 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3756 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3757 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3758 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3759 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3760 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3761 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3762 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3763 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3764 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3765 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3766 * This callback must be atomic.
3767 *
3768 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3769 *
3770 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3771 *
3772 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3773 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3774 *
3775 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3776 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3777 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3778 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3779 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3780 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3781 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3782 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3783 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3784 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3785 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3786 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3787 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3788 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3789 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3790 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3791 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3792 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3793 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3794 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3795 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3796 *
3797 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3798 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3799 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3800 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3801 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3802 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3803 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3804 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3805 *
3806 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3807 * This callback may sleep.
3808 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3809 * This callback may sleep.
3810 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3811 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3812 * channel context with different settings
3813 * This callback may sleep.
3814 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3815 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3816 * This callback may sleep.
3817 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3818 * unbound from vif.
3819 * This callback may sleep.
3820 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3821 * another, as specified in the list of
3822 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3823 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3824 * This callback may sleep.
3825 *
3826 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3827 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3828 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3829 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3830 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3831 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3832 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3833 *
3834 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3835 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3836 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3837 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3838 * This callback may sleep.
3839 *
3840 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3841 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3842 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3843 *
3844 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3845 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3846 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3847 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3848 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3849 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3850 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3851 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3852 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3853 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3854 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3855 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3856 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3857 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3858 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3859 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3860 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3861 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3862 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3863 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3864 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3865 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3866 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3867 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3868 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3869 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3870 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3871 *
3872 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3873 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3874 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3875 *
3876 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3877 * and hardware limits.
3878 *
3879 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3880 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3881 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3882 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3883 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3884 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3885 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3886 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3887 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3888 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3889 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3890 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3891 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3892 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3893 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3894 * the function call.
3895 *
3896 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3897 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3898 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3899 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3900 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3901 *
3902 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3903 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3904 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3905 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3906 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3907 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3908 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3909 * changed parameters.
3910 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3911 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3912 * this call.
3913 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3914 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3915 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3916 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3917 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3918 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3919 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3920 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3921 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3922 *
3923 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3924 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3925 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3926 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3927 * This callback may sleep.
3928 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3929 * This callback may sleep.
3930 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3931 * 4-address mode
3932 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
3933 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
3934 * to use rx decapsulation offload
3935 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
3936 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
3937 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
3938 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
3939 * twt structure.
3940 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
3941 * from the peer.
3942 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
3943 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
3944 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
3945 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
3946 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
3947 * radar channel.
3948 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
3949 * disable background CAC/radar detection.
3950 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
3951 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
3952 */
3953struct ieee80211_ops {
3954 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3955 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3956 struct sk_buff *skb);
3957 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3958 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3959#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3960 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3961 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3962 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3963#endif
3964 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3966 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3967 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3968 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3969 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3970 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3971 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3972 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3973 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3974 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3975 u32 changed);
3976
3977 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3978 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3979
3980 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3981 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3982 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3983 unsigned int changed_flags,
3984 unsigned int *total_flags,
3985 u64 multicast);
3986 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3987 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3988 unsigned int filter_flags,
3989 unsigned int changed_flags);
3990 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3991 bool set);
3992 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3993 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3994 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3995 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3997 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3998 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3999 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4000 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4001 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4002 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4003 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4005 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4006 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4007 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4008 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4009 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4010 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4011 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4012 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4013 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4015 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4016 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4017 const u8 *mac_addr);
4018 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4020 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4021 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4022 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4023 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4024 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4025 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4026 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4027 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4028 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4029 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4030 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4031#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4032 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4034 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4035 struct dentry *dir);
4036#endif
4037 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4038 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4039 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4040 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4041 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4042 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4043 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4044 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4045 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4046 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4048 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4049 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4050 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4051 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4052 u32 changed);
4053 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4055 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4056 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4059 struct station_info *sinfo);
4060 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4061 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4062 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4063 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4064 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4065 u64 tsf);
4066 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4067 s64 offset);
4068 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4069 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4070
4071 /**
4072 * @ampdu_action:
4073 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4074 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4075 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4076 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4077 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4078 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4079 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4080 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4081 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4082 *
4083 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4084 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4085 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4086 *
4087 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4088 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4089 *
4090 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4091 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4092 * - ``TX: 81``
4093 *
4094 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4095 *
4096 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4097 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4098 * if the session can start immediately.
4099 *
4100 * The callback can sleep.
4101 */
4102 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4103 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4104 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4105 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4106 struct survey_info *survey);
4107 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4108 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4109#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4110 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4111 void *data, int len);
4112 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4113 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4114 void *data, int len);
4115#endif
4116 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4117 u32 queues, bool drop);
4118 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4119 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4120 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4121 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4122 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4123
4124 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4125 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4126 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4127 int duration,
4128 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4129 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4130 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4131 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4132 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4133 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4134 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4135 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4136 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4137 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4139 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4140
4141 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4143 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4144 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4145 bool more_data);
4146 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4147 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4148 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4149 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4150 bool more_data);
4151
4152 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4153 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4154 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4155 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4156 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4157 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4158 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4159 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4160
4161 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4162 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4163 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4164 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4165 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4166 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4167
4168 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4170
4171 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4172 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4173 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4175 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4176 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4177 u32 changed);
4178 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4179 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4180 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4181 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4184 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4186 int n_vifs,
4187 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4188
4189 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4190 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4191
4192#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4193 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4194 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4195 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4196#endif
4197 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4198 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4199 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4200 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4201 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4202 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4203
4204 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4205 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4206 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4207 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4208 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4209 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4210 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4211
4212 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4213 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4214 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4215 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4216 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4217 int *dbm);
4218
4219 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4221 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4222 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4223 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4224 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4225 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4226 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4227 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4228 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4229 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4230
4231 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4232 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4233 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4234
4235 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4236 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4237 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4238 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4239 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4240 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4241 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4242 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4243 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4245 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4246 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4247 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4248 u8 instance_id);
4249 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4250 struct sk_buff *head,
4251 struct sk_buff *skb);
4252 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4254 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4255 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4256 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4257 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4258 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4259 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4260 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4261 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4262 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4263 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4264 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4265 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4266 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4267 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4268 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4269 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4270 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4271 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4272 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4273 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4274 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4275 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4276 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4277 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4278 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4279 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4280 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4281 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4282 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4283 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4284 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4285 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4286 struct net_device_path *path);
4287};
4288
4289/**
4290 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4291 *
4292 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4293 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4294 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4295 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4296 * @priv_data_len.
4297 *
4298 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4299 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4300 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4301 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4302 *
4303 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4304 */
4305struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4306 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4307 const char *requested_name);
4308
4309/**
4310 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4311 *
4312 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4313 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4314 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4315 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4316 * @priv_data_len.
4317 *
4318 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4319 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4320 *
4321 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4322 */
4323static inline
4324struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4325 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4326{
4327 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4328}
4329
4330/**
4331 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4332 *
4333 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4334 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4335 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4336 *
4337 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4338 *
4339 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4340 */
4341int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4342
4343/**
4344 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4345 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4346 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4347 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4348 */
4349struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4350 int throughput;
4351 int blink_time;
4352};
4353
4354/**
4355 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4356 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4357 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4358 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4359 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4360 */
4361enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4362 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4363 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4364 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4365};
4366
4367#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4368const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4369const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4370const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4371const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4372const char *
4373__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4374 unsigned int flags,
4375 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4376 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4377#endif
4378/**
4379 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4380 *
4381 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4382 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4383 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4384 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4385 *
4386 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4387 *
4388 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4389 */
4390static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4391{
4392#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4393 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4394#else
4395 return NULL;
4396#endif
4397}
4398
4399/**
4400 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4401 *
4402 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4403 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4404 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4405 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4406 *
4407 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4408 *
4409 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4410 */
4411static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4412{
4413#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4414 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4415#else
4416 return NULL;
4417#endif
4418}
4419
4420/**
4421 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4422 *
4423 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4424 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4425 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4426 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4427 *
4428 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4429 *
4430 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4431 */
4432static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4433{
4434#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4435 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4436#else
4437 return NULL;
4438#endif
4439}
4440
4441/**
4442 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4443 *
4444 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4445 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4446 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4447 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4448 *
4449 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4450 *
4451 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4452 */
4453static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4454{
4455#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4456 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4457#else
4458 return NULL;
4459#endif
4460}
4461
4462/**
4463 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4464 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4465 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4466 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4467 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4468 *
4469 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4470 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4471 *
4472 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4473 */
4474static inline const char *
4475ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4476 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4477 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4478{
4479#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4480 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4481 blink_table_len);
4482#else
4483 return NULL;
4484#endif
4485}
4486
4487/**
4488 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4489 *
4490 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4491 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4492 *
4493 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4494 */
4495void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4496
4497/**
4498 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4499 *
4500 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4501 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4502 * before calling this function.
4503 *
4504 * @hw: the hardware to free
4505 */
4506void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4507
4508/**
4509 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4510 *
4511 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4512 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4513 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4514 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4515 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4516 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4517 *
4518 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4519 */
4520void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4521
4522/**
4523 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4524 *
4525 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4526 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4527 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4528 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4529 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4530 *
4531 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4532 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4533 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4534 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4535 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4536 *
4537 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4538 *
4539 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4540 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4541 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4542 * @list: the destination list
4543 */
4544void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4545 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4546
4547/**
4548 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4549 *
4550 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4551 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4552 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4553 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4554 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4555 *
4556 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4557 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4558 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4559 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4560 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4561 *
4562 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4563 *
4564 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4565 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4566 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4567 * @napi: the NAPI context
4568 */
4569void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4570 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4571
4572/**
4573 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4574 *
4575 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4576 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4577 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4578 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4579 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4580 *
4581 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4582 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4583 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4584 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4585 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4586 *
4587 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4588 *
4589 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4590 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4591 */
4592static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4593{
4594 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4595}
4596
4597/**
4598 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4599 *
4600 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4601 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4602 *
4603 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4604 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4605 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4606 *
4607 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4608 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4609 */
4610void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4611
4612/**
4613 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4614 *
4615 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4616 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4617 *
4618 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4619 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4620 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4621 *
4622 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4623 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4624 */
4625static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4626 struct sk_buff *skb)
4627{
4628 local_bh_disable();
4629 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4630 local_bh_enable();
4631}
4632
4633/**
4634 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4635 *
4636 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4637 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4638 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4639 *
4640 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4641 *
4642 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4643 * each other.
4644 *
4645 * @sta: currently connected sta
4646 * @start: start or stop PS
4647 *
4648 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4649 */
4650int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4651
4652/**
4653 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4654 * (in process context)
4655 *
4656 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4657 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4658 * applies.
4659 *
4660 * @sta: currently connected sta
4661 * @start: start or stop PS
4662 *
4663 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4664 */
4665static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4666 bool start)
4667{
4668 int ret;
4669
4670 local_bh_disable();
4671 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4672 local_bh_enable();
4673
4674 return ret;
4675}
4676
4677/**
4678 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4679 * @sta: currently connected station
4680 *
4681 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4682 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4683 * connected station was received.
4684 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4685 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4686 * be serialized.
4687 */
4688void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4689
4690/**
4691 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4692 * @sta: currently connected station
4693 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4694 *
4695 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4696 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4697 * from a connected station was received.
4698 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4699 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4700 * serialized.
4701 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4702 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4703 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4704 * checks.
4705 */
4706void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4707
4708/*
4709 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4710 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4711 */
4712#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4713
4714/**
4715 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4716 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4717 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4718 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4719 *
4720 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4721 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4722 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4723 *
4724 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4725 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4726 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4727 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4728 *
4729 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4730 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4731 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4732 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4733 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4734 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4735 *
4736 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4737 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4738 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4739 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4740 * use this API.
4741 */
4742void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4743 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4744
4745/**
4746 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4747 *
4748 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4749 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4750 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4751 *
4752 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4753 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4754 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4755 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4756 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4757 */
4758void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4759 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4760 struct sk_buff *skb,
4761 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4762 int max_rates);
4763
4764/**
4765 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4766 *
4767 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4768 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4769 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4770 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4771 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4772 * slow stations to starve).
4773 *
4774 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4775 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4776 */
4777void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4778 u32 thr);
4779
4780/**
4781 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4782 *
4783 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4784 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4785 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4786 *
4787 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4788 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4789 * @info: tx status information
4790 */
4791void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4792 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4793 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4794
4795/**
4796 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4797 *
4798 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4799 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4800 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4801 *
4802 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4803 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4804 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4805 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4806 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4807 *
4808 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4809 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4810 */
4811void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4812 struct sk_buff *skb);
4813
4814/**
4815 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4816 *
4817 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4818 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4819 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4820 *
4821 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4822 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4823 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4824 *
4825 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4826 * @status: tx status information
4827 */
4828void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4829 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4830
4831/**
4832 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4833 *
4834 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4835 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4836 * specific skbs.
4837 *
4838 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4839 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4840 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4841 *
4842 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4843 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4844 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4845 * @info: tx status information
4846 */
4847static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4848 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4849 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4850{
4851 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4852 .sta = sta,
4853 .info = info,
4854 };
4855
4856 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4857}
4858
4859/**
4860 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4861 *
4862 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4863 *
4864 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4865 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4866 * for a single hardware.
4867 *
4868 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4869 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4870 */
4871static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4872 struct sk_buff *skb)
4873{
4874 local_bh_disable();
4875 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4876 local_bh_enable();
4877}
4878
4879/**
4880 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4881 *
4882 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4883 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4884 *
4885 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4886 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4887 *
4888 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4889 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4890 */
4891void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4892 struct sk_buff *skb);
4893
4894/**
4895 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4896 *
4897 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4898 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4899 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4900 * 802.11 frames.
4901 *
4902 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4903 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4904 * calls in the same tx status family.
4905 *
4906 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4907 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4908 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4909 */
4910void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4911 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4912 struct sk_buff *skb);
4913
4914/**
4915 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4916 *
4917 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4918 * connected STA.
4919 *
4920 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4921 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4922 */
4923void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4924
4925#define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4926
4927/**
4928 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4929 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4930 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4931 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4932 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
4933 * should be ignored.
4934 */
4935struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4936 u16 tim_offset;
4937 u16 tim_length;
4938
4939 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4940};
4941
4942/**
4943 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4944 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4945 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4946 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4947 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4948 *
4949 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4950 * obtain the beacon template.
4951 *
4952 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4953 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4954 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4955 * applicable, the CSA count.
4956 *
4957 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4958 *
4959 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4960 */
4961struct sk_buff *
4962ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4964 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4965
4966/**
4967 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4968 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4969 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4970 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4971 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4972 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4973 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4974 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4975 *
4976 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4977 * obtain the beacon frame.
4978 *
4979 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4980 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4981 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4982 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4983 *
4984 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4985 *
4986 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4987 */
4988struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4989 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4990 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4991
4992/**
4993 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4994 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4995 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4996 *
4997 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4998 *
4999 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5000 */
5001static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5002 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5003{
5004 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
5005}
5006
5007/**
5008 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5009 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5010 *
5011 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5012 * This function is called implicitly when
5013 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5014 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5015 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5016 *
5017 * Return: new countdown value
5018 */
5019u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5020
5021/**
5022 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5023 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5024 * @counter: the new value for the counter
5025 *
5026 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5027 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5028 *
5029 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5030 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5031 */
5032void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5033
5034/**
5035 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5037 *
5038 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5039 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5040 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5041 */
5042void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5043
5044/**
5045 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5046 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5047 *
5048 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5049 */
5050bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5051
5052/**
5053 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5054 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5055 *
5056 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5057 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5058 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5059 */
5060void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5061
5062/**
5063 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5064 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5065 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5066 *
5067 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5068 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5069 *
5070 * Can only be called in AP mode.
5071 *
5072 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5073 */
5074struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5075 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5076
5077/**
5078 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5079 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5080 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5081 *
5082 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5083 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5084 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5085 *
5086 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5087 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5088 *
5089 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5090 */
5091struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5092 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5093
5094/**
5095 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5096 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5097 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5098 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5099 * if at all possible
5100 *
5101 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5102 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5103 * BSSID and address is used.
5104 *
5105 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5106 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5107 *
5108 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5109 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5110 *
5111 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5112 */
5113struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5114 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5115 bool qos_ok);
5116
5117/**
5118 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5119 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5120 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5121 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5122 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5123 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5124 *
5125 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5126 * hardware.
5127 *
5128 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5129 */
5130struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5131 const u8 *src_addr,
5132 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5133 size_t tailroom);
5134
5135/**
5136 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5137 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5138 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5139 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5140 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5141 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5142 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5143 *
5144 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5145 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5146 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5147 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5148 */
5149void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5150 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5151 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5152 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5153
5154/**
5155 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5156 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5157 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5158 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5159 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5160 *
5161 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5162 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5163 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5164 *
5165 * Return: The duration.
5166 */
5167__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5168 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5169 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5170
5171/**
5172 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5173 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5174 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5175 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5176 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5177 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5178 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5179 *
5180 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5181 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5182 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5183 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5184 */
5185void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5186 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5187 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5188 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5189 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5190
5191/**
5192 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5193 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5194 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5195 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5196 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5197 *
5198 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5199 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5200 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5201 *
5202 * Return: The duration.
5203 */
5204__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5205 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5206 size_t frame_len,
5207 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5208
5209/**
5210 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5211 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5212 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5213 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5214 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5215 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5216 *
5217 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5218 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5219 *
5220 * Return: The duration.
5221 */
5222__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5223 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5224 enum nl80211_band band,
5225 size_t frame_len,
5226 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5227
5228/**
5229 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5230 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5231 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5232 *
5233 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5234 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5235 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5236 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5237 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5238 *
5239 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5240 * frames are available.
5241 *
5242 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5243 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5244 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5245 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5246 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5247 * use common code for all beacons.
5248 */
5249struct sk_buff *
5250ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5251
5252/**
5253 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5254 *
5255 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5256 *
5257 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5258 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5259 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5260 */
5261void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5262 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5263
5264/**
5265 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5266 *
5267 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5268 * from the given packet.
5269 *
5270 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5271 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5272 * with this P1K
5273 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5274 */
5275static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5276 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5277{
5278 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5279 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5280 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5281
5282 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5283}
5284
5285/**
5286 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5287 *
5288 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5289 * and transmitter address.
5290 *
5291 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5292 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5293 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5294 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5295 */
5296void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5297 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5298
5299/**
5300 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5301 *
5302 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5303 * in the packet.
5304 *
5305 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5306 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5307 * encrypted with this key
5308 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5309 */
5310void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5311 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5312
5313/**
5314 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5315 *
5316 * @pos: start of crypto header
5317 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5318 * @pn: PN to add
5319 *
5320 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5321 * the packet payload)
5322 *
5323 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5324 * point to the crypto header)
5325 */
5326u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5327
5328/**
5329 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5330 *
5331 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5332 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5333 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5334 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5335 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5336 *
5337 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5338 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5339 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5340 *
5341 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5342 * can be done concurrently.
5343 */
5344void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5345 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5346
5347/**
5348 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5349 *
5350 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5351 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5352 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5353 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5354 * @seq: new sequence data
5355 *
5356 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5357 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5358 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5359 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5360 *
5361 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5362 * can be done concurrently.
5363 */
5364void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5365 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5366
5367/**
5368 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5369 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5370 *
5371 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5372 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5373 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5374 *
5375 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5376 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5377 */
5378void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5379
5380/**
5381 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5382 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5383 * @keyconf: new key data
5384 *
5385 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5386 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5387 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5388 *
5389 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5390 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5391 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5392 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5393 *
5394 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5395 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5396 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5397 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5398 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5399 * of the reconfiguration.
5400 *
5401 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5402 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5403 *
5404 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5405 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5406 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5407 * the key that's being replaced.
5408 */
5409struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5410ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5411 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5412
5413/**
5414 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5415 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5416 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5417 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5418 * @gfp: allocation flags
5419 */
5420void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5421 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5422
5423/**
5424 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5425 *
5426 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5427 * at the same time.
5428 *
5429 * @keyconf: the key in question
5430 */
5431void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5432
5433/**
5434 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5435 *
5436 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5437 * at the same time.
5438 *
5439 * @keyconf: the key in question
5440 */
5441void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5442
5443/**
5444 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5445 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5446 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5447 *
5448 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5449 */
5450void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5451
5452/**
5453 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5454 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5455 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5456 *
5457 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5458 */
5459void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5460
5461/**
5462 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5463 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5464 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5465 *
5466 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5467 *
5468 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5469 */
5470
5471int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5472
5473/**
5474 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5475 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5476 *
5477 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5478 */
5479void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5480
5481/**
5482 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5483 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5484 *
5485 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5486 */
5487void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5488
5489/**
5490 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5491 *
5492 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5493 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5494 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5495 * any context, including hardirq context.
5496 *
5497 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5498 * @info: information about the completed scan
5499 */
5500void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5501 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5502
5503/**
5504 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5505 *
5506 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5507 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5508 *
5509 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5510 */
5511void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5512
5513/**
5514 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5515 *
5516 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5517 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5518 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5519 * while associating, for instance.
5520 *
5521 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5522 */
5523void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5524
5525/**
5526 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5527 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5528 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5529 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5530 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5531 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5532 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5533 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5534 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5535 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5536 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5537 * for instance.
5538 */
5539enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5540 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5541 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5542 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5543 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5544};
5545
5546/**
5547 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5548 *
5549 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5550 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5551 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5552 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5553 *
5554 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5555 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5556 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5557 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5558 */
5559void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5560 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5561 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5562 void *data);
5563
5564/**
5565 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5566 *
5567 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5568 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5569 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5570 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5571 * be used.
5572 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5573 *
5574 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5575 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5576 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5577 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5578 */
5579static inline void
5580ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5581 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5582 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5583 void *data)
5584{
5585 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5586 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5587 iterator, data);
5588}
5589
5590/**
5591 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5592 *
5593 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5594 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5595 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5596 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5597 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5598 *
5599 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5600 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5601 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5602 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5603 */
5604void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5605 u32 iter_flags,
5606 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5607 u8 *mac,
5608 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5609 void *data);
5610
5611/**
5612 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5613 *
5614 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5615 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5616 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5617 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
5618 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
5619 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
5620 *
5621 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5622 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5623 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5624 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5625 */
5626void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5627 u32 iter_flags,
5628 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5629 u8 *mac,
5630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5631 void *data);
5632
5633/**
5634 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
5635 *
5636 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5637 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5638 * function for them.
5639 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5640 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
5641 *
5642 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5643 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5644 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5645 */
5646void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5647 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5648 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5649 void *data);
5650
5651/**
5652 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5653 *
5654 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5655 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5656 * function for them.
5657 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5658 *
5659 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5660 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5661 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5662 */
5663void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5664 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5665 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5666 void *data);
5667/**
5668 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5669 *
5670 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5671 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5672 *
5673 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5674 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5675 */
5676void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5677
5678/**
5679 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5680 *
5681 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5682 * workqueue.
5683 *
5684 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5685 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5686 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5687 */
5688void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5689 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5690 unsigned long delay);
5691
5692/**
5693 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5694 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5695 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5696 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5697 *
5698 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5699 *
5700 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5701 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5702 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5703 */
5704int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5705 u16 timeout);
5706
5707/**
5708 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5709 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5710 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5711 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5712 *
5713 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5714 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5715 * from any context.
5716 */
5717void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5718 u16 tid);
5719
5720/**
5721 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5722 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5723 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5724 *
5725 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5726 *
5727 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5728 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5729 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5730 */
5731int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5732
5733/**
5734 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5735 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5736 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5737 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5738 *
5739 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5740 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5741 * can be called from any context.
5742 */
5743void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5744 u16 tid);
5745
5746/**
5747 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5748 *
5749 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5750 * @addr: station's address
5751 *
5752 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5753 *
5754 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5755 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5756 */
5757struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5758 const u8 *addr);
5759
5760/**
5761 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5762 *
5763 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5764 * @addr: remote station's address
5765 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5766 *
5767 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5768 *
5769 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5770 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5771 *
5772 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5773 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5774 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5775 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5776 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5777 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5778 * is not reliable.
5779 *
5780 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5781 */
5782struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5783 const u8 *addr,
5784 const u8 *localaddr);
5785
5786/**
5787 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5788 * @hw: the hardware
5789 * @pubsta: the station
5790 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5791 *
5792 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5793 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5794 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5795 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5796 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5797 *
5798 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5799 * manner.
5800 *
5801 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5802 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5803 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5804 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5805 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5806 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5807 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5808 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5809 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5810 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5811 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5812 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5813 * woke up while blocked or not.
5814 */
5815void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5816 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5817
5818/**
5819 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5820 * @pubsta: the station
5821 *
5822 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5823 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5824 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5825 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5826 *
5827 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5828 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5829 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5830 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5831 *
5832 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5833 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5834 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5835 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5836 */
5837void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5838
5839/**
5840 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5841 * @pubsta: the station
5842 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5843 *
5844 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5845 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5846 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5847 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5848 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5849 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5850 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5851 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5852 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5853 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5854 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5855 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5856 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5857 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5858 */
5859void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5860
5861/**
5862 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5863 *
5864 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5865 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5866 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5867 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5868 *
5869 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5870 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5871 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5872 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5873 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5874 * attempts.
5875 *
5876 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5877 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5878 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5879 * them to 0.
5880 *
5881 * @pubsta: the station
5882 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5883 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5884 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5885 */
5886void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5887 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5888
5889/**
5890 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5891 *
5892 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5893 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5894 *
5895 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5896 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5897 */
5898bool
5899ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5900
5901/**
5902 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5903 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5904 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5905 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5906 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5907 *
5908 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5909 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5910 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5911 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5912 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5913 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5914 *
5915 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5916 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5917 * set_key callback.
5918 */
5919void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5920 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5921 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5922 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5923 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5924 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5925 void *data),
5926 void *iter_data);
5927
5928/**
5929 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5930 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5931 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5932 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5933 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5934 *
5935 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5936 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5937 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5938 * in removal process will be skipped.
5939 *
5940 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5941 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5942 */
5943void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5945 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5947 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5948 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5949 void *data),
5950 void *iter_data);
5951
5952/**
5953 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5954 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5955 * @iter: iterator function
5956 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5957 *
5958 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5959 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5960 * places while calling into the driver.
5961 *
5962 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5963 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5964 * removed.
5965 *
5966 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5967 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5968 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5969 * or not.
5970 */
5971void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5972 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5973 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5974 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5975 void *data),
5976 void *iter_data);
5977
5978/**
5979 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5980 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5981 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5982 *
5983 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5984 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5985 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5986 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5987 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5988 * %NULL.
5989 *
5990 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5991 */
5992struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5993 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5994
5995/**
5996 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5997 *
5998 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5999 *
6000 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6001 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6002 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6003 */
6004void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6005
6006/**
6007 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6008 *
6009 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6010 *
6011 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6012 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6013 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6014 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6015 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6016 *
6017 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6018 * without connection recovery attempts.
6019 */
6020void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6021
6022/**
6023 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6024 *
6025 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6026 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6027 *
6028 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6029 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6030 */
6031void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6032
6033/**
6034 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6035 *
6036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6037 *
6038 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6039 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6040 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6041 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6042 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6043 *
6044 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6045 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6046 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6047 * disconnect normally later.
6048 *
6049 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6050 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6051 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6052 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6053 */
6054void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6055
6056/**
6057 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6058 * rssi threshold triggered
6059 *
6060 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6061 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6062 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6063 * @gfp: context flags
6064 *
6065 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6066 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6067 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6068 */
6069void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6070 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6071 s32 rssi_level,
6072 gfp_t gfp);
6073
6074/**
6075 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6076 *
6077 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6078 * @gfp: context flags
6079 */
6080void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6081
6082/**
6083 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6084 *
6085 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6086 */
6087void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6088
6089/**
6090 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6091 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6092 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6093 *
6094 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6095 * and wake up the suspended queues.
6096 */
6097void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6098
6099/**
6100 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6101 * @vif &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6102 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6103 *
6104 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6105 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6106 * a deauth frame in this case.
6107 */
6108void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6109 bool block_tx);
6110
6111/**
6112 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6113 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6114 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6115 *
6116 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6117 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6118 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6119 */
6120void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6121 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6122
6123/**
6124 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6125 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6126 */
6127void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6128
6129/**
6130 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6131 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6132 */
6133void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6134
6135/**
6136 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6137 *
6138 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6139 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6140 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6141 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6142 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6143 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6144 *
6145 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6146 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6147 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6148 */
6149void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6150 const u8 *addr);
6151
6152/**
6153 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6154 * @pubsta: station struct
6155 * @tid: the session's TID
6156 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6157 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
6158 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6159 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6160 *
6161 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6162 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6163 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6164 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6165 */
6166void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6167 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6168 u16 received_mpdus);
6169
6170/**
6171 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6172 *
6173 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6174 * buffer.
6175 *
6176 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6177 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6178 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6179 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6180 */
6181void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6182
6183/**
6184 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6185 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6186 * @addr: station mac address
6187 * @tid: the rx tid
6188 */
6189void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6190 unsigned int tid);
6191
6192/**
6193 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6194 *
6195 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6196 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6197 * reordering.
6198 *
6199 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6200 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6201 *
6202 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6203 * @addr: station mac address
6204 * @tid: the rx tid
6205 */
6206static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6207 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6208{
6209 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6210 return;
6211 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6212}
6213
6214/**
6215 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6216 *
6217 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6218 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6219 * reordering.
6220 *
6221 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6222 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6223 *
6224 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6225 * @addr: station mac address
6226 * @tid: the rx tid
6227 */
6228static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6229 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6230{
6231 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6232 return;
6233 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6234}
6235
6236/**
6237 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6238 *
6239 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6240 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6241 *
6242 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6243 *
6244 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6245 * @addr: station mac address
6246 * @tid: the rx tid
6247 */
6248void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6249 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6250
6251/* Rate control API */
6252
6253/**
6254 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6255 *
6256 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6257 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6258 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6259 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6260 * to be filled in
6261 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6262 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6263 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6264 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6265 * RTS threshold
6266 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6267 * if the selected rate supports it
6268 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6269 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6270 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6271 */
6272struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6273 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6274 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6275 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6276 struct sk_buff *skb;
6277 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6278 bool rts, short_preamble;
6279 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6280 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6281 bool bss;
6282};
6283
6284/**
6285 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6286 */
6287enum rate_control_capabilities {
6288 /**
6289 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6290 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6291 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6292 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6293 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6294 */
6295 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6296 /**
6297 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6298 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6299 */
6300 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6301};
6302
6303struct rate_control_ops {
6304 unsigned long capa;
6305 const char *name;
6306 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6307 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6308 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6309 void (*free)(void *priv);
6310
6311 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6312 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6313 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6314 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6315 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6316 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6317 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6318 u32 changed);
6319 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6320 void *priv_sta);
6321
6322 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6323 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6324 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6325 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6326 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6327 struct sk_buff *skb);
6328 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6329 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6330
6331 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6332 struct dentry *dir);
6333
6334 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6335};
6336
6337static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6338 enum nl80211_band band,
6339 int index)
6340{
6341 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6342}
6343
6344static inline s8
6345rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6346 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6347{
6348 int i;
6349
6350 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6351 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6352 return i;
6353
6354 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6355 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6356
6357 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6358 return 0;
6359}
6360
6361static inline
6362bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6363 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6364{
6365 unsigned int i;
6366
6367 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6368 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6369 return true;
6370 return false;
6371}
6372
6373/**
6374 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6375 *
6376 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6377 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6378 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6379 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6380 *
6381 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6382 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6383 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6384 */
6385int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6386 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6387 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6388
6389int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6390void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6391
6392static inline bool
6393conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6394{
6395 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6396}
6397
6398static inline bool
6399conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6400{
6401 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6402 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6403}
6404
6405static inline bool
6406conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6407{
6408 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6409 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6410}
6411
6412static inline bool
6413conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6414{
6415 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6416}
6417
6418static inline bool
6419conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6420{
6421 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6422 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6423 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6424}
6425
6426static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6427ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6428{
6429 if (p2p) {
6430 switch (type) {
6431 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6432 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6433 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6434 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6435 default:
6436 break;
6437 }
6438 }
6439 return type;
6440}
6441
6442static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6443ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6444{
6445 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6446}
6447
6448/**
6449 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6450 *
6451 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6452 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6453 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6454 *
6455 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6456 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6457 * matching GroupId management frame.
6458 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6459 */
6460void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6461 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6462
6463void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6464 int rssi_min_thold,
6465 int rssi_max_thold);
6466
6467void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6468
6469/**
6470 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6471 *
6472 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6473 *
6474 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6475 *
6476 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6477 * applicable.
6478 */
6479int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6480
6481/**
6482 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6483 * @vif: virtual interface
6484 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6485 * @gfp: allocation flags
6486 *
6487 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6488 */
6489void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6490 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6491 gfp_t gfp);
6492
6493/**
6494 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6495 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6496 * @vif: virtual interface
6497 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6498 * @band: the band to transmit on
6499 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6500 *
6501 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6502 */
6503bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6505 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6506
6507/**
6508 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6509 * of injected frames.
6510 *
6511 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6512 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6513 * of the skb before calling this function.
6514 *
6515 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6516 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6517 */
6518bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6519 struct net_device *dev);
6520
6521/**
6522 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6523 *
6524 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6525 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6526 *
6527 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6528 *
6529 * private:
6530 *
6531 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6532 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6533 */
6534struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6535 u32 next_tsf;
6536 bool has_next_tsf;
6537
6538 u8 absent;
6539
6540 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6541 struct {
6542 u32 start;
6543 u32 duration;
6544 u32 interval;
6545 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6546};
6547
6548/**
6549 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6550 *
6551 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6552 * @data: NoA tracking data
6553 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6554 *
6555 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6556 */
6557int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6558 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6559
6560/**
6561 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6562 *
6563 * @data: NoA tracking data
6564 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6565 */
6566void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6567
6568/**
6569 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6570 * @vif: virtual interface
6571 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6572 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6573 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6574 * @gfp: allocation flags
6575 *
6576 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6577 */
6578void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6579 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6580 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6581
6582/**
6583 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6584 *
6585 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6586 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6587 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6588 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6589 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6590 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6591 *
6592 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6593 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6594 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6595 *
6596 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6597 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6598 *
6599 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6600 */
6601int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6602
6603/**
6604 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6605 *
6606 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6607 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6608 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6609 *
6610 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6611 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6612 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6613 *
6614 * @sta: the station
6615 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6616 */
6617void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6618
6619/**
6620 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6621 *
6622 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6623 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6624 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6625 *
6626 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6627 *
6628 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6629 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6630 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6631 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6632 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6633 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6634 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6635 *
6636 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6637 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6638 */
6639struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6640 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6641
6642/**
6643 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6644 * (in process context)
6645 *
6646 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6647 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6648 *
6649 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6650 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6651 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6652 */
6653static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6654 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6655{
6656 struct sk_buff *skb;
6657
6658 local_bh_disable();
6659 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6660 local_bh_enable();
6661
6662 return skb;
6663}
6664
6665/**
6666 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6667 *
6668 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6669 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6670 *
6671 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6672 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6673 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6674 */
6675struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6676
6677/**
6678 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6679 *
6680 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6681 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6682 *
6683 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6684 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6685 */
6686void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6687
6688/* (deprecated) */
6689static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6690{
6691}
6692
6693/**
6694 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6695 *
6696 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6697 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6698 *
6699 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6700 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6701 *
6702 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6703 * this TXQ internally.
6704 */
6705void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6706
6707/**
6708 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6709 *
6710 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6711 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6712 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6713 *
6714 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6715 * internally.
6716 */
6717void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6718 bool force);
6719
6720/**
6721 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6722 *
6723 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6724 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6725 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6726 * next_txq().
6727 *
6728 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6729 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6730 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6731 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6732 * again.
6733 *
6734 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6735 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6736 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6737 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6738 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6739 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6740 *
6741 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6742 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6743 */
6744bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6745 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6746
6747/**
6748 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6749 *
6750 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6751 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6752 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6753 *
6754 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6755 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6756 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6757 */
6758void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6759 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6760 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6761
6762/**
6763 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6764 *
6765 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6766 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6767 *
6768 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6769 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6770 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6771 * @gfp: allocation flags
6772 */
6773void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6774 u8 inst_id,
6775 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6776 gfp_t gfp);
6777
6778/**
6779 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6780 *
6781 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6782 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6783 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6784 *
6785 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6786 * @match: match event information
6787 * @gfp: allocation flags
6788 */
6789void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6790 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6791 gfp_t gfp);
6792
6793/**
6794 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6795 *
6796 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6797 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6798 *
6799 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6800 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6801 * information.
6802 * @len: frame length in bytes
6803 */
6804u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6805 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6806 int len);
6807
6808/**
6809 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6810 *
6811 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6812 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6813 *
6814 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6815 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6816 * @len: frame length in bytes
6817 */
6818u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6819 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6820 int len);
6821/**
6822 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6823 *
6824 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6825 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6826 * hardware or firmware.
6827 *
6828 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6829 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6830 */
6831bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6832
6833/**
6834 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6835 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6836 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6837 *
6838 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6839 *
6840 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6841 */
6842struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6844
6845/**
6846 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6847 * probe response template.
6848 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6849 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6850 *
6851 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6852 *
6853 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6854 */
6855struct sk_buff *
6856ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6857 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6858
6859/**
6860 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
6861 * collision.
6862 *
6863 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6864 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
6865 * aware of.
6866 */
6867void
6868ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6869 u64 color_bitmap);
6870
6871/**
6872 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
6873 *
6874 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
6875 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
6876 *
6877 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
6878 */
6879static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
6880{
6881 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
6882 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
6883
6884 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
6885 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
6886}
6887
6888#endif /* MAC80211_H */